واژه پردازی به کمک کامپیوتر

‫واژه ﭘﺮدازی ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ‬

‫ﻧﮑﺎت ﮐﻠﯿﺪی در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ‪:‬‬

‫_ ﻣﺮوری ﺑﺮ ﻣﻌﻤﺎری ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Microsoft ® Word‬‬ ‫_ اﺻﻮل اوﻟﯿﻪ اﯾﺠﺎد ﺳﻨﺪ و اﯾﺠﺎد ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎی ﺣﺮﻓﻪ ای‬ ‫_ ﻣﻬﺎرت ﻻزم ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮدن‪ ،‬وﯾﺮاﯾﺶ و اﻧﺘﺸﺎر اﺳﻨﺎد‬ ‫_ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺷﯿﻮه ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬اﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ و ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻫﻮش‬ ‫_ ﺳﺎزﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺟﺪاول‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻮدارﻫﺎ و ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ ﮔﺮاﻓﯿﮑﯽ‬ ‫_ ﮐﺎر ﺑﺎ وﯾﮋﮔﯽ ادﻏﺎم ﭘﺴﺘﯽ و ﮐﺎر ﻣﺸﺘﺮک ﺑﺮ روی ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎ‬

‫‪GET MORE OUT OF COMPUTING‬‬

‫ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪International Computer Driving License‬‬

‫ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬واژه ﭘﺮدازی ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ‬

‫ﻓﻬـﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨـﺪرﺟـﺎت‬ ‫‪1‬ـ ﺷﺮوع ﮐﺎر‬ ‫‪ (١-١‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻫﺎ ‪١ ...........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (١-٢‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪١ ........................................................................................................... Microsoft Word‬‬ ‫‪ (١-٣‬ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪٢ ....................................................................................................... Microsoft Word‬‬ ‫‪ (١-٤‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯ ‪۴ .............................................................................................. Microsoft Word‬‬ ‫‪ (٤-١-١‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪۴ .....................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٤-١-٢‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۵ .................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٤-١-٣‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪۶ .......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٤-١-٤‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ‪۶ ..............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٤-١-٥‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ‪۶ .............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٤-١-٦‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ‪۶ ...........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٤-١-٧‬ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۷ ............................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٤-١-٨‬ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ‪۷ ......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٤-١-٩‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ‪۷ .....................................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪ (١-٥‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪۷ .........................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪۷ ..............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-۲‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪۸ .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-۳‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻭ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻲ ‪۱۰ ...............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-٤‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ‪۱۱ ..................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-٥‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯ ‪۱۱ .................................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪ (١-٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻛﻤﻚ ‪۱۲ ......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (١-٧‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ‪۱۲ .................................................................................................................... Microsoft Word‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ اﻋﻤﺎل ﭘﺎﯾﻪ‬ ‫‪ (٢-١‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۱۳ ......................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٢-٢‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ‪۱۳ ......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٢-٣‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۱۳ ................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٢-٤‬ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۱۳ ..............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٢-٥‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ‪۱۴ ......................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٢-٥-١‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪۱۴ .....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٢-٥-٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Undo‬ﻭ ‪ Redo‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۱۴ .....................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪ (٢-٦‬ﻛﭙﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ‪۱۴ .................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٢-٧‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ‪۱۵ ...............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٢-٧-١‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۱۵ ......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٢-٧-٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۱۶ ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٢-٧-٣‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۱۶ ......................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی در ‪Microsoft Word‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-١‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻱ ‪۱۷ ................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-١-١‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪﻱ ‪۱۷ ...........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-١-٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ ‪۱۷ ....................................................................................................................‬‬

‫ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬واژه ﭘﺮدازی ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ‬

‫‪International Computer Driving License‬‬

‫‪ (٣-١-٢-١‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ‪۱۹ ...........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-١-٢-٢‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ‪۲۰ ........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-١-٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ‪۲۰ ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-١-٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪۲۱ .................................................................................................................. Change Case‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-١-٥‬ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪۲۱ .................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪ (٣-٢‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ‪۲۱ ............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٢-١‬ﺗﺮﺍﺯﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ‪۲۲ ....................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٢-٢‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ‪۲۲ ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٢-٣‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ‪۲۳ ........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٢-٤‬ﺗﻐییﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﻤﺎیﺶ ﻫﺮ یﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۲۳ ..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٢-۵‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ‪۲۴ ..........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٢-۵-١‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ‪۲۴ .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٢-۵-٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ‪ Paragraph‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ‪۲۴ ........................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٢-۶‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ ‪۲۵ ..........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٢-۷‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪۲۶ ...................................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪ (٣-٣‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ‪۲۷ ....................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٣-١‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ‪۲۷ ................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٣-٢‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ‪۲۷ .............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٣-٣‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ‪۲۸ ....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٣-٣-١‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪۲۸ .....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٣-٣-٢‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪۲۸ ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٣-٣-٣‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪۲۸ ..........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٣-٤‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۲۹ .............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٣-٥‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۳۰ ......................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٣-٦‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ ‪۳۰ ................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٣-۷‬ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎیﯽ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ یﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۳۱ .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٣-٣-۸‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﻣیﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۳۱ ...................................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪4‬ـ ﺷﮑﻞ دادن ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ (٤-١‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۳۲ ....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٤-١-١‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Formatting‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ‪۳۲ .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٤-١-٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Style‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪۳۳ ...................................................................................................... Format‬‬

‫‪ (٤-٢‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪۳۴ ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٤-٢-١‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪۳۴ ..................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٤-٢-٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ‪۳۴ ................................................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪ (٤-٣‬ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻠﻂ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ‪۳۵ ...................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٤-٣-١‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ‪۳۵ ..............................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٤-٣-١-١‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ‪۳۵ ............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٤-٣-١-٢‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪۳۵ ........................................................................ Spelling and Grammar‬‬ ‫‪ (٤-٣-٢‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ )‪۳۶ ................................................................................................................. (AutoCorrect‬‬

‫‪ (٤-٤‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ‪۳۷ .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٤-۵‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ‪۳۷ .....................................................................................‬‬

‫‪International Computer Driving License‬‬

‫ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬واژه ﭘﺮدازی ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ‬

‫‪5‬ـ وﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪ (٥-١‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ‪۳۸ ...............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-١‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۳۸ ................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-١-١‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪۳۸ ............................................................................................................................ (Insert‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-١-٢‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ )‪۳۹ ............................................................................................................. (Draw Table‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-٢‬ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۳۹ ......................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-٣‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۴۰ ....................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-٤‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺳﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۴۰ .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-٥‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۴۱ .......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-٦‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ‪۴۱ ..............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-٧‬ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪۴۱ ..........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-٨‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ‪۴۱ ............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-٩‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۴۱ .............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-١٠‬ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۴۱ .................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-١١‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۴۱ ..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-١٢‬ﻣﺘﻤﺎیﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۴۲ .......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-١-١۳‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ Tab‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ‪۴۲ ................................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪ (٥-٢‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪۴۳ .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-٢-١‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۴۳ ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-٢-٢‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ‪ ClipArt‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۴۴ ........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-٢-٣‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۴۵ ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-٢-٤‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۴۶ ......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-٢-٥‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۴۷ ..........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-٢-٦‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪۴۷ .......................................................................................‬‬

‫‪ (٥-٢-٦-١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪۴۷ ...............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-٢-٦-٢‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ‪۴۷ ...............................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-٢-٦-٣‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪۴۷ .........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-٢-٦-٤‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ‪۴۸ .............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-٢-٦-٥‬ﺣﺬﻑ ‪۴۸ .................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-٢-٦-٦‬ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪۴۸ ........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-٢-٦-٧‬ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ‪۴۸ ........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-٢-٦-٨‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ‪۴۸ ...........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-٣‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ ‪۴۹ .......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-٤‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ‪۴۹ ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٥-٥‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ‪۵۲ .....................................................................‬‬

‫‪6‬ـ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮدن‬ ‫‪ (٦-١‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﺎﭖ ‪۵۴ ....................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٦-٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﭼﺎﭖ ‪۵۴ ...............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ (٦-٣‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۵۵ ........................................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪١‬ـ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ (1-1‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ای ﺑﺮ واژه ﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻫﺎ )‪ (Word Processors‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻟﺒﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪ ١‬ﺑﺸﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺠﺰ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﭼﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ Word‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ؛ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ؛ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﺎﭖ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﭼﻴﺪﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭ ‪ ....‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪) WYSWYG‬ﺳﺮﻧﺎﻡ ﻛﻠﻤﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ (What You See Is What You Get‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬ ‫» ﻫﺮ آﻧﭽﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻧﺘﯿﺠﮥ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ«‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺁﻓﻴﺲ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﻭ ﺟﺬﺍﺏ ﻭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﺳﺎﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺁﻓﻴﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻓﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺳﺮﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺏ ﻧﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺳﻬﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺳﺎﻓﺖ ﺁﻓﻴﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬ ‫ـ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ‪ :‬ﭘﻨﺘﻴﻮﻡ ‪٢٣٣‬‬ ‫ـ ‪ ١٦‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪RAM‬‬ ‫ـ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻫﺎﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (1-2‬اﺟﺮای ﻧﺮم اﻓﺰار ‪Microsoft Word‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Start‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Programs‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺝ( ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Microsoft Word‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (١‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺳﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ Office (٢‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Microsoft Word, Excel, Outlook, PowerPoint, Access, Publisher‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺳﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ (1-3‬اﺟﺰاء اﺻﻠﯽ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ‪Microsoft Word‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺁﻓﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺑﺘﺮﻳﻦﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱﺗﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬

‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ‬

‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬

‫ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬

‫ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬

‫ﺳﻨﺪ ‪Word‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬

‫ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬

‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪Office Assistant‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻥ )ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ(‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬

‫ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬

‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ‪ I‬ﺷﻜﻞ‬

‫)‪(Status bar‬‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﺘﻦ )‪(Insertion Point‬‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ ،Word‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻓﻴﺲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺑﻪ ‪ Word‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪ ،Word‬ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺯﻥ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ Word ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Word‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﺞ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ »ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ‪ «٣‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Task Pane‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ View‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1) Task Pane‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )‪ :(Title Bar‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻲ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺑﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪) Close‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ( ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪(Alt+F4) .‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪) Maximize‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ (‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪) Minimize‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ(‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ )‪ :(Menu Bar‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺄﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ )‪ :(ToolBars‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﻛﻤﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ )‪ (Standard‬ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪﻱ )‪ (Formatting‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﻔﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺯﻥ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ )‪ :(Ruler‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺁﻣﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ View‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Ruler‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ )‪ :(Status Bar‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ ،(Page‬ﺑﺨﺶ )‪ ،(Sec‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ )‪ (Ln/Col‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪ (1-4‬ﮐﺎر ﺑﺎ اﺳﻨﺎد در واژه ﭘﺮداز ‪Microsoft Word‬‬ ‫‪ (4-1-1‬اﯾﺠﺎد ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ New‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻴﭻ‬ ‫ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ )ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ View|Toolbars|Standard‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ New‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ :File‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ New‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬ ‫‪ File‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺳﺮ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Right-to-Left‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Formating‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ‪ Ctrl+Shift‬ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Left-to-Right‬‬

‫ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ )ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ‪ Ctrl+Shift‬ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ )ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻻﺗﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ( ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Alt+Shift‬ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻻﺗﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬

‫ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﺘﻦ؛ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Shift‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ )‪ :(Capital‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Shift‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺖ ‪ :Word Wrap‬ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Space‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Enter‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Enter‬ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Enter‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد ﮐﻠﯿﺪ در ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ‬

‫‪Enter‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬

‫‪Home‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺧﻂ‬

‫‪End‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻂ‬

‫‪Ctrl+Home‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫‪Ctrl+End‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫‪PageUp‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‬

‫‪PageDown‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬

‫‪Ctrl+PageUp‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫‪Ctrl+PageDown‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد ﮐﻠﯿﺪ در ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ‬

‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬

‫‪Shift+F5‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ) (‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ) (‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ) (‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ) (‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ‬

‫‪ + Ctrl‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻐﺖ‬

‫‪ + Ctrl‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻐﺖ‬

‫‪ + Ctrl‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬

‫‪ + Ctrl‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬

‫‪Backspace‬‬

‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬

‫‪Delete‬‬

‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬

‫‪Ctrl+Backspace‬‬

‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬

‫‪Ctrl+Delete‬‬

‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬

‫‪Ctrl+Enter‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬

‫‪Shift+J‬‬

‫ﻛﺸﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﻬـــــــﺎﺭﺕ(‬

‫‪ (4-1-2‬ذﺧﯿﺮه ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﺍﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬

‫ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Save‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(Ctrl+S) .‬‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪ ،Save in‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺴﻜﺖ ))‪(3.5 Floppy (A:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬ـ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ‬

‫‪ Save‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ Enter‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪ Word document‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ از ذﺧﯿﺮه ﮐﺮدن آﻧﻬﺎ ﺷﺮوع ﻣﯽﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﺑﺮای ﺑﻬﺒﻮد روﻧﺪ ذﺧﯿﺮهﺳﺎزی در ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮد ﻣﻮارد زﯾﺮ را در ﻧﻈﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫• ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺳﺎﻓﺖ ‪ .doc ،Word‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-3‬ذﺧﯿﺮه ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺎری ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﯽ دﯾﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻼ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Save‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ‪ Save as‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Save‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ ‪F12‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Save as‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪File‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-4‬ﺑﺎز ﮐﺮدن ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ ‪ File‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Open‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Ctrl+O‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Open‬ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-5‬ﺑﺎز ﮐﺮدن ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Open‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫» ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪Ctrl‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‬

‫» ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪Shift‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Open‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-6‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﯿﻦ اﺳﻨﺎد ﺑﺎز ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Alt‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ‪ Tab‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻴﹰﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻳﻜﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Alt‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩ )‪.(Alt+Tab‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ ،Window‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ (4-1-7‬ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Close‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪(Ctrl+W) File‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻼ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒ ًَﹶ‬ ‫ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Save‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Cancel‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-8‬ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎی ﺑﺎز ﺑﻄﻮر ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Shift‬ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Close all‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-9‬ذﺧﯿﺮه ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎی ﺑﺎز ﺑﻄﻮر ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Shift‬ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Save all‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬ ‫‪ File‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (1-5‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎت ﭘﺎﯾﻪ‬ ‫‪ (5-1-1‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Word‬ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣ ﹰﺎ ﻧﻤﺎ‬ ‫)‪ (View‬ﻣﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ View‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ ٦‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Word‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Outline‬‬

‫‪Web Layout‬‬

‫‪Print Layout‬‬

‫‪Normal‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬

‫‪Normal View‬‬

‫‪Y‬‬

‫‪Web Layout View‬‬

‫‪Z‬‬

‫‪Print Layout View‬‬

‫[‬

‫‪Outline View‬‬

‫\‬

‫‪Document Map‬‬

‫]‬

‫‪Thumbnails‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Word‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻣﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Print Layout‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺳﺒﻜﻬﺎﻱ )‪ (Styles‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻴﻮﺓ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺳﻨﺪﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻴﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﻴﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-2‬ﮐﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ در ﻧﻮار اﺑﺰار اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺳﺎﻓﺖ ‪ Word‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱﺗﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Toolbar‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ :View‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺄﻭﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﻠﺖ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪More Buttons‬‬

‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Add or Remove Buttons‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪) .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Customize‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ(‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪ g‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻓﻴﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻚ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Options‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ ،Customize‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬

‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﮕﺎﺭﺷﻬﺎﻱ‬

‫ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ g‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Tools|Customize‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Options‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﻭ ‪ Formating‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ g‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻓﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Word‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Toolbars‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Customize‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪New‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Toolbars name‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Customize‬ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Commands‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬ـ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ )ﻣﻨﻮﻱ( ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ )‪ (Categories‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ )‪،(Commands‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺑﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﮒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ g‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ‪ Word :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Commands‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Customize‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ New Menu‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Categories‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ New Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ )‪ (Commands‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﮒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Name‬ﻧﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Modify Selection‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Customize‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ g‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Commands‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Customize‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪10‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪٣‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪) Menu bar‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ( ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪) Toolbar‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ،Add‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Add Commands‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ Commands‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Delete‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Close‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ‬

‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬

‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬

‫‪ (5-1-3‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﺑﺰار ﺑﺰرگ و ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻠﻂ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪،Zoom‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬

‫‪ View‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Zoom‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬

тАлтАк11тАмтАм

тАлтАкMicrosoft яЫЪ WordтАмтАм

тАл┘И╪з┌Ш┘ЗянШя║о╪п╪з╪▓я╗ля║О тАк /тАмя╗гя╗мя║О╪▒╪к я║│я╗о┘Е тАк /тАмя║Чя║к┘Ияп╛я╗ж тАк :тАмя║│яп┐я║к я╗гя║дя╗дя║к ╪пя║│я║ШяоХя║о╪п█МтАм

тАлтАк (5-1-4тАмяоРя║О╪▒ я║Ся║О я╗Ля╗╝я║Ля╗в я╗Чя║Оя╗Яя║Р я║Ся╗ия║к█МтАм тАля║йя║н я║Ня╗│я╗ж я╗зя║оя╗б я║Ня╗Уя║░я║Ня║н я║Ся║оя║Ня╗▒ я║│я╗мя╗оя╗Яя║Ц я║йя║н я║Ня╗гя║о я║Чя║оя║Ня║п я╗Ыя║оя║йя╗е я╗гя║Шя╗ж я╗гя╗▓ я║Чя╗оя║Ня╗зя╗┤я║к я║Ня║п я╗Ля╗╝я║Ля╗в я╗Уя║оя╗гя║Ц я║Ня║│я║Шя╗Фя║Оя║йя╗й я╗Ыя╗ия╗┤я║ктАк ╪МтАмя╗Ля╗╝я║Ля╗в я╗Уя║оя╗гя║Ц я║йя║н я╗ля╗ияоХя║Оя╗б ян╝я║ОянЦ я║│я╗ия║к я║Ся║отАм тАля║ня╗ня╗▒ я╗Ыя║Оя╗Пя║м я╗Зя║Оя╗ля║о я╗зя╗дя╗▓ я║╖я╗оя╗зя║ктАк ╪МтАмя║Ся╗ая╗Ья╗к я╗Уя╗Шя╗В я║Ся╗к я╗Ля╗ия╗оя║Ня╗е я╗│я╗Ъ я║Ня║Ся║░я║Ня║н я╗Ыя╗дя╗Ья╗▓ я║Ся║о я║ня╗ня╗▒ я║│я╗ия║к я║╖я╗дя║О я║Ся╗к я╗зя╗дя║Оя╗│я║╢ я║йя║н я╗гя╗▓ я║Бя╗│я╗ия║ктАк .тАмя║Ся║оя║Ня╗▒ я║Ня╗│я╗ия╗Ья╗к я╗Ля╗╝я║Ля╗в я╗Уя║оя╗гя║Ц я║йя║нтАм тАля║│я╗ия║к я╗Зя║Оя╗ля║о я║╖я╗оя╗зя║к я╗│я╗Ья╗▓ я║Ня║п я╗гя║оя║Ня║гя╗Ю я║пя╗│я║о я║ня║Н я║Ня║Яя║оя║Н я╗Ыя╗ия╗┤я║ктАк:тАмтАм тАля║Ня╗Яя╗Т( я║йя╗Ыя╗дя╗ктАм

тАля║ня║Н я╗Ыя╗к я║Ся║о я║ня╗ня╗▒ я╗зя╗оя║Ня║н я║Ня║Ся║░я║Ня║н тАк StandardтАмя╗Чя║оя║Ня║н я║йя║Ня║ня║й я╗Ыя╗ая╗┤я╗Ъ я╗Ыя╗ия╗┤я║ктАк.тАмтАм

тАля║П( я╗Ыя╗ая╗┤я║кя╗ля║Оя╗▒ я║Чя║оя╗Ыя╗┤я║Тя╗▓тАм

тАлтАк Ctrl+ ├ДтАмя║ня║Н я╗ля╗дя║░я╗гя║Оя╗е я╗Уя║╕я║Оя║н я║йя╗ля╗┤я║ктАк.тАмтАм

тАля║йя║н я║Яя║кя╗ня╗Э я║пя╗│я║о я╗Ля╗╝я╗гя║Шя╗мя║Оя╗▒ я╗Чя║Оя╗Яя║Р я║Ся╗ия║кя╗▒ я╗гя║Шя╗ж я║Бя╗гя║кя╗й я║Ня║│я║ЦтАк.тАмтАм

тАл┬╢тАм тАл тАм

тАля╗Ля╗╝я╗гя║Ц янШя║Оя║ня║НяоФя║оя║Ня╗СтАм

тАля╗зя╗Шя╗Дя╗к я║Ня╗зя║Шя╗мя║Оя╗│я╗▓ я╗│я╗Ъ янШя║Оя║ня║НяоФя║оя║Ня╗С я║ня║Н я╗гя║╕я║ия║║ я╗гя╗▓ я╗Ыя╗ия║ктАм

тАля╗Ля╗╝я╗гя║Ц я║╖я╗Ья║┤я║ШяоХя╗▓ я╗гя║Шя╗жтАм

тАля╗зя╗Шя╗Дя╗к я║Ня╗▒ я╗Ыя╗к я╗гя║Шя╗ж я║йя║н я╗│я╗Ъ я║│я╗Дя║о я║╖я╗Ья║┤я║Шя╗к я║╖я║кя╗й я║Ня║│я║Ц я║ня║Н я╗зя║╕я║Оя╗е я╗гя╗▓ я║йя╗ля║ктАм

тАлтАк.тАмтАм

тАля╗Ля╗╝я╗гя║Ц я╗Уя╗Ая║Оя╗▒ я║зя║Оя╗Яя╗▓тАм

тАля╗Уя╗Ая║Оя╗▒ я║зя║Оя╗Яя╗▓ я║Ся╗┤я╗ж я╗Ыя╗ая╗дя║Оя║Х я║ня║Н я╗гя║╕я║ия║║ я╗гя╗▓ я╗Ыя╗ия║ктАм

тАля╗Ля╗╝я╗гя║Ц я║Чя╗оя╗Чя╗ТтАм

тАля╗гя║дя╗Ю я╗│я╗Ъ я╗зя║╕я║Оя╗е я║Чя╗оя╗Чя╗Т я╗│я║О тАк Tab StopтАмя║ня║Н я╗гя║╕я║ия║║ я╗гя╗▓ я╗Ыя╗ия║ктАм

тАлтАкIтАмтАм

тАля║йя║н я╗гя║Шя╗ж я║пя╗│я║о я║Ся║оя║зя╗▓ я║Ня║п я║Ня╗│я╗ж я╗Ля╗╝я║Ля╗в я╗зя║╕я║Оя╗е я║йя║Ня║йя╗й я║╖я║кя╗й я║Ня║│я║ЦтАк.тАмтАм

тАлтАк (5-1-5тАмя║Чя╗ия╗Ияп┐я╗в я╗Чя║Оя║Ся╗аяп┐я║Шя╗мя║О█М ┘Ияп╛яоЛ┘З ╪п╪▒ ┘И╪з┌Ш┘З янШя║о╪п╪з╪▓тАм тАля╗│я╗Ья╗▓ я║Ня║п я╗гя╗мя╗дя║Шя║оя╗│я╗ж я╗Чя║┤я╗дя║Шя╗мя║Оя╗│я╗▓ я╗Ыя╗к я╗Ыя║Оя║ня║Ся║оя║Ня╗е я║Бя╗Уя╗┤я║▓ я║Бя╗е я║ня║Н я║йя╗зя║Тя║Оя╗Э я╗гя╗▓ я╗Ыя╗ия╗ия║к я║Ня║│я║Шя╗Фя║Оя║йя╗й я║Ня║зя║Шя║╝я║Оя║╗я╗▓ я╗н я║Чя╗ия╗Ия╗┤я╗в я╗Чя║Оя║Ся╗ая╗┤я║Шя╗мя║Оя╗▒ я║зя║Оя║╣ я║Ня╗│я╗ж яоФя╗оя╗зя╗к я╗зя║оя╗б я║Ня╗Уя║░я║Ня║ня╗ля║ОтАм тАля╗гя╗▓ я║Ся║Оя║╖я║ктАк .тАмя║Ся║оя║Ня╗▒ я║Ня╗│я╗ия╗Ья╗к я║Ся║Шя╗оя║Ня╗зя╗┤я╗в я║йя║н я╗гя║дя╗┤я╗В я╗зя║оя╗б я║Ня╗Уя║░я║Ня║н тАк WordтАмя╗зя╗┤я║░ ян╝я╗ия╗┤я╗ж я║Ня╗Ля╗дя║Оя╗Яя╗▓ я║ня║Н я║Ня╗зя║ая║Оя╗б я║йя╗ля╗┤я╗в я╗гя║оя║Ня║гя╗Ю я║пя╗│я║о я║ня║Н я║йя╗зя║Тя║Оя╗Э я╗зя╗дя║Оя╗│я╗┤я║ктАк:тАмтАм тАлтАк┘бтАм┘А я╗гя║┤я╗┤я║о тАк Tools|Options...тАмя║ня║Н я║йя╗зя║Тя║Оя╗Э я╗Ыя╗ия╗┤я║ктАк.тАмтАм тАлтАк┘втАм┘А я╗Ыя║Оя║йя║н я╗гя╗Ья║Оя╗Яя╗дя╗к я║Ня╗▒ я╗гя║░я║Ся╗оя║н я║йя║н я║╗я╗Фя║дя╗к я╗зя╗дя║Оя╗│я║╢ я╗Зя║Оя╗ля║о я╗гя╗▓ я║╖я╗оя║йтАк .тАмянШя║▓ я║Ня║п я║Ня╗зя║Шя║ия║Оя║П я║│я║оя║Ся║ояоТ я║йя╗Яя║ия╗оя║Ня╗й я║Чя╗ия╗Ия╗┤я╗дя║Оя║Х я╗гя║ия║Шя╗ая╗Т я║зя╗оя║й я║ня║Н я║Ня╗Ля╗дя║Оя╗Э я╗зя╗дя║Оя╗│я╗┤я║ктАк.тАмтАм тАля║йя║н я║Ня║йя║Ня╗гя╗к я║╖я╗дя║О я║ня║Н я║Ся║О я║Ся║оя║зя╗▓ я║Ня║п я║Ня╗│я╗ж я╗Чя║Оя║Ся╗ая╗┤я║Шя╗мя║О я║Бя║╖я╗ия║О я╗гя╗▓ я╗Ыя╗ия╗┤я╗втАк.тАмтАм тАл┘А я║Чя╗ия╗Ия╗┤я╗дя║Оя║Х я║йя║│я║Шя║оя║│я╗▓ я║Ся╗к я║│я╗ия║кя╗ля║ОтАк :тАмя║Ся║оя║Ня╗▒ я║Ня╗│я╗ж я╗Ля╗дя╗Ю я║│я║оя║Ся║ояоТ тАк File LocationsтАмя║ня║Н я║Ня╗зя║Шя║ия║Оя║П я╗зя╗дя║Оя╗│я╗┤я║к я║│янЩя║▓ я╗гя╗Дя║Оя║Ся╗Ц я║Чя║╝я╗оя╗│я║о я║пя╗│я║о я╗гя║дя╗Ю я║ля║зя╗┤я║оя╗й янШя╗┤я║╢тАм тАля╗Уя║оя║╜ я╗Чя║Оя╗Яя║Тя╗мя║Оя╗▒ я║│я╗ия║к я║зя╗оя║йя║Чя║Оя╗е я║ня║Н я║Чя╗ия╗Ия╗┤я╗в я╗зя╗дя║Оя╗│я╗┤я║ктАк.тАмтАм

тАля╗гя║дя╗Ю я║ля║зя╗┤я║оя╗й я║│я╗ия║кя╗ля║ОтАм тАля╗гя║дя╗Ю я╗Уя║оя║Ня║зя╗оя╗зя╗▓ я║Чя║╝я║Оя╗ня╗│я║отАм

тАля╗гя║дя╗Ю янШя║оя╗ня╗зя║кя╗й я╗ля║Оя╗▒ я║Ся║Оя║пя╗│я║Оя║Ся╗▓ я║зя╗оя║йя╗Ыя║Оя║нтАм

тАл┘А я║Чя╗ия╗Ия╗┤я╗дя║Оя║Х я╗гя║╕я║ия║╝я║Оя║Х я╗Ыя║Оя║ня║Ся║о тАк :тАмя║Яя╗мя║Ц я║Ня╗Ля╗дя║Оя╗Э я║Чя╗Ря╗┤я╗┤я║оя║Ня║Х я╗гя║╕я║ия║╝я║Оя║Х я╗гя║оя║Ся╗оя╗Б я║Ся╗к я╗Ыя║Оя║ня║Ся║о я╗гя╗▓ я║Чя╗оя║Ня╗зя╗┤я║к я║Ня║п я║│я║оя║Ся║ояоТ тАк User InformationтАмя║Ня║│я║Шя╗Фя║Оя║йя╗йтАм тАля╗Ыя╗ия╗┤я║ктАк .тАмя║йя║н я║Ня╗│я╗ж я╗Чя║┤я╗дя║Ц я║╖я╗дя║О я╗гя╗▓ я║Чя╗оя║Ня╗зя╗┤я║к я╗гя║╕я║ия║╝я║Оя║Х я║зя╗оя║й я║ня║Н я║╖я║Оя╗гя╗Ю я╗зя║Оя╗бтАк ╪МтАмя╗зя║Оя╗б я║зя║Оя╗зя╗оя║Ня║йяоФя╗▓ я╗н я╗зя║╕я║Оя╗зя╗▓ янШя║┤я║Шя╗▓ я║йя║н я║Ня╗│я╗ж я╗Чя║┤я╗дя║Ц я║йя║ня║Э я╗Ыя╗ия╗┤я║ктАк.тАмтАм тАл┘А я╗зя╗дя║Оя╗│я║╢ я╗Ля╗╝я║Ля╗в я╗Чя║Оя╗Яя║Р я║Ся╗ия║кя╗▒ тАк :тАмя║Ня║п я║│я║оя║Ся║ояоТ тАк ViewтАмя╗Чя║┤я╗дя║Ц тАк ╪МFormatting markтАмяоФя║░я╗│я╗ия╗к тАк AllтАмя║ня║Н я║йя║н я║гя║Оя╗Яя║Ц я║Чя║Оя╗│я╗┤я║к я╗Чя║оя║Ня║н я║йя╗ля╗┤я║к я║Чя║О я╗ля╗дя╗к я╗Ля╗╝я║Ля╗втАм тАля╗Чя║Оя╗Яя║Р я║Ся╗ия║кя╗▒ я║йя║н я╗гя║Шя╗ж я║│я╗ия║к я╗гя║╕я║Оя╗ля║кя╗й я║╖я╗оя║йтАк.тАмтАм

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪12‬‬

‫‪ (1-6‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﮐﺮدن از ﺗﻮاﺑﻊ ﮐﻤﮏ )‪(Help‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Help‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Help‬ﺩﺭ ‪ Word‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Help‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Microsoft word Help‬‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﻛﺴﺐ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺑﺮگ ‪ :Contents‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Word‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﭘﺒﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ )ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ( ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺁﻳﻜﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺑﺮگ ‪ :Ansewer Wizard‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺑﺮگ ‪ : Index‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ؛ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Online Help‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ؟ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ؟ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ É‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﺳﺎﻓﺖ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ Office Assistant .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦﻫﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﮊﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪) Answer Wizard‬ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﺪ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Help‬ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺷﺪﻥ ‪Office‬‬

‫‪ Assistant‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Show the Office Assistant‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (1-7‬ﺧﺮوج از ‪Microsoft Word‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Word‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ‪ File|Exit‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪close‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪13‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬ ‫‪ (2-1‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (2-2‬وارد ﮐﺮدن ﮐﺎراﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎی وﯾﮋه )ﺳﯿﻤﺒﻮل(‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺷﻜﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺭﭘﻴﭻ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪Webdings ،Symbol ،AGA Arabesque .‬‬ ‫‪ wingdings‬ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻻﺗﻴﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻤﺒﻞﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻤﺒﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Insert|Symbol‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪ Symbol‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ‪ Font‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Insert‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Cancel‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (2-3‬وارد ﮐﺮدن ﺗﺎرﯾﺦ و زﻣﺎن ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Date and Time‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪Insert‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Available formats‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (2-4‬روﺷﻬﺎی اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺘﻦ در ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬ ‫روﺷﻬﺎی اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ‪Ctrl+Shift +‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪Ctrl+Shift +‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪Ctrl+Shift +‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ‪Ctrl+Shift +‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ‪Ctrl+A‬‬

‫‪14‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫روﺷﻬﺎی اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﺎوس‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻐﺖ‬

‫ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻟﻐﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺮ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻄﺮ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺭﮒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Ctrl‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Ctrl‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Alt‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‬ ‫»ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ« )‪ (Drag and Drop‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬

‫‪ (2-5‬وﯾﺮاﯾﺶ داده ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ (2-5-1‬درج و ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Insert‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ OVR‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ( ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺩﺍﺑﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (2-5-2‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﺑﺰارﻫﺎی ‪ Undo‬و ‪ Redo‬در ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫‪Redo‬‬

‫‪Undo‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Ctrl+Z‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Undo‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ Undo‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Undo‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Redo‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ (Undo‬ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ)‪ .(Ctrl+Y‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﺶ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (2-6‬ﮐﭙﯽ‪ ،‬اﻧﺘﻘﺎل و ﺣﺬف‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪Edit‬‬

‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ g‬ﻛﭙﻲ )‪ : (Copy‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ g‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ )‪ : (Cut‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ g‬ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪﻥ )‪ : (Past‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Past‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪15‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪» Ã‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ Cut‬ﺁﻥ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ‪ Copy‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻧﻮﺷﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﭙﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪«.‬‬ ‫‪ Ã‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ ‪ Clipboard‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Clipboard‬ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ‪ RAM‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ g‬ﺣﺬﻑ )‪ : (Clear‬ﺑﺮای اﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﯿﻢ ﻣﺘﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را از ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﺣﺬف ﮐﻨﯿﻢ از ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Edit‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ Clear‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬ ‫ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ )ﺟﻬﺖ راﺣﺘﯽ ﮐﺎر ﻣﯽﺗﻮاﻧﯿﻢ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ Delete‬را از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺵ‬

‫ﻛﭙﻲ‬

‫ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬

‫ﺭﻭﺵ‬

‫‪Ctrl+X‬‬

‫‪Ctrl+C‬‬

‫‪Ctrl+V‬‬

‫‪Edit | Cut‬‬

‫‪Edit | Copy‬‬

‫‪Edit | Past‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫‪Cut‬‬

‫‪Copy‬‬

‫‪Past‬‬

‫‪ (2-7‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ و ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻨﯽ‬ ‫‪ (2-7-1‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﺑﺰار ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ در ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫در اﯾﻦ ﮐﺎدر‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻤﻪ و ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎرت ﻣﻮرد ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫را ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺑﻌﺪی‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ و ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮدن‬ ‫ﮐﺎدر ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎت ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬

‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﻮارد ﺧﺎص‬

‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪیﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﺭﺍ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Find‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(Ctrl+F) .‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Find what‬ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Find Next‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Find Next‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪16‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪Mach Case‬‬

‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﻭ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

‫‪Find whole words only‬‬

‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻐﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﻟﻐﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻐﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻟﻐﺖ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Use widcards‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺸﻴﻨﻲ )*‪ (? ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪Sound like (English‬‬

‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻐﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪Find all word forms (English‬‬

‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Mach kashida‬‬

‫‪ (2-7-2‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﺑﺰار ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻨﯽ در ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Replace‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ‪ Ctrl+H‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Find What‬ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Tab‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Replace with‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Find Next‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Replace‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Find Next‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٧‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Replace All‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (2-7-3‬اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣﮑﺎن ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Find‬ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Go to‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺮﺵ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Go to‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Ctrl+G‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Next‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭ ‪ Previous‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ +‬ﻳﺎ – ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﭘﺮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Close‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪17‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی در ‪Microsoft Word‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ‪ Word‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻠﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ word‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺘﺮﻱ )‪ (Character Formatting‬ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻲ )‪(Paragraph Formatting‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺳﻨﺪ )‪ (Document Formatting‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-1‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﺎراﮐﺘﺮی‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪» .‬ﻗﻠﻢ«‪» ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻢ«‪» ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻠﻢ« ﻭ »ﺳﺒﻚ ﻗﻠﻢ« ﻫﻤﮕﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺘﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﻫﻢ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ )ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺪ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-1-1‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﻮار اﺑﺰار ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪی )‪(Formatting‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Formatting‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻱ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﻬﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ View|Toolbar|Formatting‬ﻧﻮار ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ در ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﮐﺎر ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Formatting‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ‪ Word‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻠﻢ‬

‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬

‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ‬

‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻻﺗﻴﻦ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺭﺏ‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ‬

‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬

‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻂﺩﺍﺭ‬

‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻠﻢ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ‬

‫ﺗﻮﭘﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺒﻚ‬

‫‪ (3-1-2‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮐﺎدر ﻣﺤﺎوره ای ﻓﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﮕﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Time New Roman‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ .Arial‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﭘﻮﻳﻨﺖ )‪(Point‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ ٧٢‬ﭘﻮﻳﻨﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻛﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺷﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ Font‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ ‪ Ctrl+D‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ( ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﻮ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )]‪(Ctrl+‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )[‪(Ctrl+‬‬

‫‪18‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ‬

‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ‬

‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪Regular :‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺏ‪(Ctrl+I) Italic :‬‬ ‫ﺿﺨﻴﻢ‪(Ctrl+B) Bold :‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻻﺗﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻠﻢ‬

‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﻠﻢ‬

‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ‬

‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ )‪(Ctrl+Shift+K‬‬

‫ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ‬

‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ )‪(Ctrl+Shift+A‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ )=‪(Ctrl+‬‬

‫ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬

‫ﺯﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ )=‪(Ctrl+Shift+‬‬

‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﻠﻢ‬

‫ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ‬

‫ﻓﺮﻭﺭﻓﺘﻪ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺧﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ‬

‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ‬

‫‪ : Latin text Font‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﻣﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Font Style‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Regular‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ(‪) Italic ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺏ(‪) Bold ،‬ﭘﺮﺭﻧﮓ(‪،‬‬ ‫‪) BoldItalic‬ﭘﺮﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺏ( ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Size‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Complex scripts‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ )ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪ /‬ﻋﺮﺑﻲ( ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :All text‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪Font‬‬ ‫‪ Color‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻠﻢ‪ Underline Style ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻄﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ‪Underline‬‬ ‫‪ Color‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : Effects‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪19‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪ : Preview‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬

‫‪Sin + 2(Ctrl+Shift+=)+α‬‬ ‫)=‪Co + 2(Ctrl+‬‬

‫‪Sin2α‬‬ ‫‪Co2‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬

‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪: Strikethrough‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ :Double Strikethrough‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ : Shadow‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ :Outline‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ :Emboss‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ :Engrave‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ )ﻓﺮﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ :Small caps‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺘﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ :All caps‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ :Hidden‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-1-2-1‬اﻋﻤﺎل ﺟﻠﻮه ﻫﺎی وﯾﮋه ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎراﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺯﻥ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺟﻠﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ‪ Font‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Font‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Text Effect‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ ،Animations‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬ـ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪20‬‬

‫‪ (3-1-2-2‬ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺣﺮوف‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ‬ ‫‪ Character Spacing‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Font‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬

‫‪ : Scale‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺩﺭﺍﺯﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ Preview‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Spacing z‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Condensed‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ Spacing‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ By‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Expanded‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ Spacing‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ By‬ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Normal‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ Spacing‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬

‫‪ : Position‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ By‬ﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ Raised) .‬ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻭ ‪ Lowered‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬ ‫‪ : Kerning for Fonts z‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-2-3‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ‬

‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬

‫‪Ctrl+B‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ‪) Bold‬ﺿﺨﯿﻢ( را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Ctrl+I‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ‪) Italic‬ﻣﻮرب( را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Ctrl+U‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ‪) Underline‬زﯾﺮ ﺧﻂ دار( را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Ctrl+D‬‬

‫ﮐﺎدر ﻣﺤﺎوره ‪ Font‬را ﺑﺎز ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫>‪Ctrl+Shift+‬‬

‫اﻓﺰاﯾﺶ اﻧﺪازه ﻓﻮﻧﺖ‬

‫<‪Ctrl+Shift+‬‬

‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ اﻧﺪازه ﻓﻮﻧﺖ‬

‫]‪Ctrl+‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﯾﺰ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را ﺑﺼﻮرت ﯾﮏ واﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ واﺣﺪ اﻓﺰاﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫[‪Ctrl+‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﯾﺰ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را ﺑﺼﻮرت ﯾﮏ واﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ واﺣﺪ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫=‪Ctrl+Shift+‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻦ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻧﺪﯾﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ )‪ (Superscript‬ﻗﺮار ﻣﯽ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫=‪Ctrl+‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻦ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻧﺪﯾﺲ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ )‪ (Subscript‬ﻗﺮار ﻣﯽ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Ctrl+Shift+F‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ Font‬واﻗﻊ در ﻧﻮار اﺑﺰار ‪ Formatting‬را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Ctrl+Shift+P‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ Size‬واﻗﻊ در ﻧﻮار اﺑﺰار ‪ Formatting‬را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪21‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪ (3-1-4‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ‪Change Case‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﮕﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯ ‪ Word‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ‪ Change Case‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺪﺍﺭﻙ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Change Case‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﭻ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ : Sentence case‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ : lowercase‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ : UPERCASE‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ : Title Case‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Title Case‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ : tOGGLE cASE‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-1-5‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮدن ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺨﺶ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه از ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﺵ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺑﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Format Painter‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ‪ Format Painter‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﮒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Format Painter‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-2‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺁﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺸﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪22‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ (3-2-1‬ﺗﺮازﺑﻨﺪی ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﭼﭗ ﭼﻴﻦ )‪ ،(Align Left‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻴﻦ )‪ ،(Align Right‬ﻭﺳﻂ ﭼﻴﻦ‬ ‫)‪ (Center‬ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ )‪ (Justify‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﭼﭗ ﭼﻴﻦ )‪ ،(Align Left‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻴﻦ )‪ ،(Align Right‬ﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﭼﻴﻦ )‪ (Center‬ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ )‪ (Justify‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Formatting‬‬ ‫‪Ctrl+J‬‬

‫‪Ctrl+R‬‬

‫‪Ctrl+E‬‬

‫‪Ctrl+L‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Paragraph‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪Alignment‬‬

‫‪ (3-2-2‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎی ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪١‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Paragraph‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ‪ Paragraph‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ Line Spacing‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : Single‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ(‬ ‫• ‪ : 1.5 lines‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ‪ ١/٥‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : Double‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : At least‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ At‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Exactly‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ At‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺯﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫• ‪ : Multiple‬ﻣﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ At‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ At‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻴﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬

‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬

‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪TAB‬‬

‫‪23‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪ (3-2-3‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ Spacing‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ‪ ،Paragraph‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Befor‬ﻭ ‪ After‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-2-4‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ دادن روش ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻫﺮ ﯾﮏ از ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪ Word ،‬ﺳﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻧﺮﻡ )‪ (Soft Page Breaks‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻧﺮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ Word‬ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ) ‪Manual Page‬‬

‫‪ (Breaks‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ Page Break‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Normal‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Word‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ Widow‬ﻭ ‪ Orphan‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ‪ ،Widow‬ﺧﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ‪Orphan‬‬

‫ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ Widow‬ﻭ ‪ Orphan‬ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺮ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ ،Word‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Paragraph‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Paragraph‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ‪ ،Paragraph‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Line and Page Breaks‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬

‫‪Widow / Orphan control‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ (Widow‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ (Orphan‬ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Keep lines together‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Keep with next‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬

‫‪Page break befor‬‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Suppress line numbers‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺎﭖ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﭼﺎﭖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Don’t hyphenate‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪24‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪ (3-2-5‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺗﻮرﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ (3-2-5-1‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺧﻂ ﮐﺶ ﺑﺮای ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺗﻮرﻓﺘﮕﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪ Paragraph‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻼﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪Print Layout‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺑﻲ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ Print Layout‬ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ )ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ(‬

‫ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺧﻂ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﻣﻌﻠﻖ(‬ ‫ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ )ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ(‬

‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Formatting‬ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪Increase Indent‬‬

‫ﻭ ‪Decrease Indent‬‬

‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ‬

‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ‪ Ctrl+M‬ﻭ ‪ Ctrl+Shift+M‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Tab‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ )‪ ١/٢٧‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ‬

‫ﭼﭗ‬

‫‪ (3-2-5-2‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮐﺎدر ﻣﺤﺎوره ‪ Paragraph‬ﺑﺮای ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺗﻮرﻓﺘﮕﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Paragraph‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Paragraph‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Before Text‬ﻭ ‪) After Text‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ( ﺩﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ( ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ First line‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ Hanging‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪ Special‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ By‬ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪25‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ (3-2-6‬ﮐﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎی ﺷﻤﺎره دار و ﻋﻼﻣﺖ دار‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ )‪ :(In linelist‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Paste‬‬

‫‪Time‬‬

‫‪Name‬‬

‫‪Family‬‬

‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ )‪ :(Bulleted list‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻗﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬

‫‪Name‬‬ ‫‪Family‬‬ ‫‪Paste‬‬ ‫‪Time‬‬

‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ )‪ :(Numbered list‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬ـ ‪Name‬‬ ‫‪2‬ـ ‪Family‬‬ ‫‪3‬ـ ‪Paste‬‬ ‫‪4‬ـ ‪Time‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Bullets and Numbering‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭ )‪ :(Bullet‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Bullets and Numbering‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ Bullets‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪ Bullets and Numbering‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺳﻪ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ :Bulleted‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ :Numbered‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺝ( ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Outline Numbered‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Customize...‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ None‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻣﺘﻦ‬

‫ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ‬

‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪26‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪ (3-2-7‬ﮐﺎر ﺑﺎ اﻧﻮاع ﮐﺎدرﻫﺎ و ﭘﺲ زﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺮ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Borders and shading‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﻪ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬

‫ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ :Borders‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ :Page Border‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ :Shading‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.١‬ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Borders‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Style‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Color‬ﻭ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Width‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Preview‬ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻄﻮﺑﺴﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Page Border‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﻡ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻦ‬

‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ‬

‫ﺝ( ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Shading‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Fill‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺳﺒﻚ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Style‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Color‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪27‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ (3-3‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی اﺳﻨﺎد‬ ‫‪ (3-3-1‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ‪ ١/٢٥‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪﻫﺎ؛ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Page Setup‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Margins‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ Margins‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‬

‫ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﭼﭗ‬

‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻴﺮﺍﺯﻩ‬

‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺷﻴﺮﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﻮﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬

‫‪ (3-3-2‬ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ اﻧﺪازه و ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪ Page Setup‬ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Margins‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻮع ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Orientation‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Portrait‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ »ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ« ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Landscape‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ »ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ« ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ اﻧﺪازه ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ Paper Size‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ ،Paper‬ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‬ ‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ )ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ( ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Custom Size‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ‪ Width‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ Height‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻏﺪ ‪ 21-29.7cm ،A4‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪28‬‬

‫‪ (3-3-3‬ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ( ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺴﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺰﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ( ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﻠﻄﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ :‬ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﺺ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-3-3-1‬درج ﯾﮏ ﺟﺪا ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Insert‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Break‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ‪Break‬‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Section break types‬ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪) Section‬ﺑﺨﺶ( ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫_ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ Next page‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫_ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Continiuous‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫_ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻭﺝ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Even page‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Odd page‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻇﺎﺭﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ )ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Normal‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫_ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪ Break‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ )ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ( ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪،(Ctrl+Enter=Page break‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ )‪ (Column break‬ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (Text wrapping break‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-3-3-2‬ﺣﺬف ﯾﮏ ﺟﺪا ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Delete‬ﻳﺎ ‪ BackSpace‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Normal‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-3-3-3‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﯾﮏ ﺑﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Page setup‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ‪ Apply to‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ‬

‫‪29‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ This Section‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ‪ This point forward ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭ ‪ Whole Document‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-3-4‬اﯾﺠﺎد ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ و ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ (Header‬ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ (Footer‬ﺩﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺳﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Page Layout‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Normal‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Header and Footer‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ View‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻛﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ‪ Header‬ﻭ ‪) Footer‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ( ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ Header‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ‪) Header and Footer‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ( ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ‬

‫ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬

‫ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ‬

‫ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬

‫‪Page Setup‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫ﻣﺘﻦ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ Header‬ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺻﻔﺨﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Switch between Header and Footer‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Header and‬‬ ‫‪ Footer‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Close‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Header and Footer‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ‪:‬‬ ‫_ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Page Setup‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Layout‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬

‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫_ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺯﻭﺝ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Page Setup‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Layout‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬

‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪30‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪ (3-3-5‬اﯾﺠﺎد ﺷﻤﺎره ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Header and Footer‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Insert Page Number‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺮﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Page Number‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Insert‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ‪ Page Numbers‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫_ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Position‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ )‪ Buttom of Page (Footer‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ )‪ ،Top of Page (Header‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫_ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Alignment‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬ ‫‪ Right ،Left‬ﻭ ‪ Center‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺻﺤﺎﻓﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪) Inside‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﺷﻴﺮﺍﺯﻩ( ﻳﺎ ‪) Outside‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫_ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪ Show number of first page‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫_ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ Format‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-3-6‬اﯾﺠﺎد ﭘﺎورﻗﯽ و ﯾﺎداﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ )‪ (Footnote‬ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ )‪ (Endnote‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘ ﹰﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ Insert |Refreance|Footnote‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ؛ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬

‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ‬

‫‪31‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Location‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ (Footnote‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ )‪ (Endnote‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Numbring‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Restrat each page‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ Continues‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺑﺠﺰ ‪ ١‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Start at‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ‪ Ctrl+Alt+F‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Delete‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻔﺸﺎﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ )ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ( ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Conver‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (3-3-7‬ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ اﺻﻮل ﻧﺤﻮۀ ﺷﻤﺎرش ﻋﺒﺎرات ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ‪Space‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ‪Space‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬

‫ﻼ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪١‬ـ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Tools‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Word Count‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Word Count‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺁﻣﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Word Count‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Show Toolbar‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (3-3-8‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب زﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺑﺮای ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫‪ Word‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Background‬ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ‪ Background‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪32‬‬

‫‪4‬ـ ﺷﮑﻞ دادن ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ (4-1‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎر ﺑﺮدن ﯾﮏ ﺷﯿﻮه ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Word‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ Style‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Formatting‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ‬ ‫‪ Ctrl+Shift+S‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ (.‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ‪ Format|Styles and Formatting‬ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ Style‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Styles and Formatting‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ‪ Word‬ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ g‬ﺳﺒﻚ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )‪ : (Heading‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺒﻜﻬﺎﻱ ‪ Word‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻴﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ ‪ Heading1‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻴﺘﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ‪ Heading2‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻴﺘﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ g‬ﺳﺒﻚ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ )‪ : (Normal‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺒﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ g‬ﺳﺒﻚ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ : (Footer and Header‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ g‬ﺳﺒﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ )‪ : (Footnote Text‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺒﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ g‬ﺳﺒﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ : (Page Number‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺒﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-1‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﻮار اﺑﺰار ‪ Formatting‬ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﯿﻮه‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪،Formatting‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﺮﻛﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Style list‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ـ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪33‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-2‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﺳﺘﻮر ‪ Style‬در ﻣﻨﻮی ‪Format‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺰﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺭﺩﺳﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪ Word‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Format|Style‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ‪ Style‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺷﻴﻮﻩﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ Style‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪New Style‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﺒﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Name‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﺒﻜﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ،Format‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺒﻚ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ :Font‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ :Paragraph‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭼﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ :Tab‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Tab‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ :Border‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﻮﺓ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ :Frame‬ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭼﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ :Numbering‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Add Template‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٧‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﺓ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ Automatically update‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﺓ ‪ Normal‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٨‬ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪34‬‬

‫ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ Style‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Shortcut Key‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪Format‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ New Style‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪Press New‬‬

‫‪ Shortcut‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ،Assign‬ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Close‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (4-2‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﯾﮏ اﻟﮕﻮی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮای اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﯾﮏ ﮐﺎرﺑﺮد‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ ‪ Word‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ )‪ (Template‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ )‪ Document Template (Dot‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎ ً ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻣﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ‪ Normal‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-2-1‬اﯾﺠﺎد ﯾﮏ اﻟﮕﻮی ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ File|New‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ‪ New Document‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ New‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ ،Standard‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ‬ ‫‪ Normal‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ‪ New Document‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ On my computer‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎﻱ ‪) General‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ( ـ‬

‫& ‪Letter‬‬

‫‪) Faxes‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻛﺲ ﻫﺎ( ـ ‪) Memos‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺘﻬﺎ( ﻭ ‪) Other Documents‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎ( ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ‪ Blank Document‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ General‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Create New‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Template‬‬

‫ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Save as‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ‪ Windows|Application data|Microsoft|Templates‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ General‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-2-2‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻟﮕﻮی ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ New‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪35‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬ـ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ Document‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Create New‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺏ ‪ Doc‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-3‬ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ اﺻﻮل ﻏﻠﻂ ﮔﯿﺮ اﻣﻼﯾﯽ و ﮔﺮاﻣﺮی‬ ‫‪ (4-3-1‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮل اﻣﻼﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﻣﻼ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻣﻼﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬

‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮل اﻣﻼﯾﯽ ﺧﻮدﮐﺎر‬

‫•‬

‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮل اﻣﻼﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ اﺟﺮای دﺳﺘﻮر ‪Spelling and Grammar‬‬

‫‪ (4-3-1-1‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮل اﻣﻼﯾﯽ ﺧﻮدﮐﺎر‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﻔﺶ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺑﺎﻫﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ‪ Tools|Options‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Spelling & Grammar‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Check spelling as you type‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻏﻠﻂ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Add‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-3-1-2‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮل اﻣﻼﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ اﺟﺮای دﺳﺘﻮر ‪Spelling and Grammar‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻠﻂ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Spelling & Grammar‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Tools‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ F7‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Spelling & Grammar‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪36‬‬

‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬

‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﻱ‬

‫ﻏﻠﻂ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ‬

‫‪ (4-3-2‬ﺗﺼﺤﯿﺢ ﺧﻮدﮐﺎر )‪(AutoCorrect‬‬ ‫‪ Autocorect‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺛﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ‪ Word‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ AutoCorrect‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Tools‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ AutoCorrect‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﭘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ WORD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Caps Lock‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻫــﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻳــﭗ ﻋﻤــﻞ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨــﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑــﻪ ﻃــﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺧﻄﺎﻳﺎﺏ ‪ Word‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Repelace‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ With‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Add‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ‪ Microsoft Word‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Repelace‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ Word‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ With‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ‪ Microsoft Word‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﺠﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Tab ،Enter‬ﻭ ‪ Spacebar‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪37‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪ (4-4‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮدﮐﺎر )‪(Autotext‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺯﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ ،Word‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻼ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺧﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻴﺪ!(‬ ‫ﭘﺮﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺭﻭﺯﻣﺮﻩ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ AutoText‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ AutoText‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Insert‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ AutoCorrect‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ AutoText‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Add‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ AutoText‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ AutoText‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ AutoText‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Insert‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ ،AutoText‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Insert‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ AutoText‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ(‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺯﺭﺩ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ AutoText‬ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Enter‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-5‬آﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭘﯿﻮﻧﺪ در ﻣﮑﺎن ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ Word‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﻀﺎﺀ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ )ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ( ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪(Document1.doc‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Open‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬

‫‪٣‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Copy‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻼ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪(Document2.doc‬‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪٥‬ـ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ(‬

‫‪٦‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Past Special‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ(‬

‫‪٧‬ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ As‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٨‬ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Past Link‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٩‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪38‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪ ٥‬ـ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪ (5-1‬ﺗﻮاﻧﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺟﺪاول‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻧﺪﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫)ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‪ (Column :‬ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ )ﺳﻄﺮ‪ (Row :‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ )‪ (Cell‬ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Word‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻟﺒﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-1‬اﯾﺠﺎد ﺟﺪول‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(Insert Table‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(Draw Table‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-1-1‬درج ﺟﺪول )‪(Insert‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Table‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Insert‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Table ...‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ )‪ (Rows‬ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ )‪ (Columns‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ word‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ AutoFormat...‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫‪39‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Insert Table‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ ،Standard‬ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Insert Table‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩﮔﺮ ﻣﺄﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺄﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪﺗﺎﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫‪ (5-1-1-2‬ﺑﻪ روش ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ )‪(Draw Table‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Table|Draw Table‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺄﻭﺱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Table and Borders‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭼﭗ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩﮔﺮ ﻣﺄﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Draw Table‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Table and Borders‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩﮔﺮ ﻣﺄﻭﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﺔ ) ‪ ( I‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Table and Borders‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻂ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ‬

‫‪ (5-1-2‬ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﻣﺘﻦ در ﺟﺪول‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻠﻮﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻠﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻠﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Tab‬ﻭ ﺳﻠﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Shift+Tab‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪40‬‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﻢ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Tab‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﻢ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-3‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب اﺟﺰای ﺟﺪول‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد‬

‫روش ﻫﺎی اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺮ‬

‫ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Table|Select|Rows‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻄﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ )ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ( ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Table|Select|Coulmn‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Table‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Select‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Cells‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻥ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺳﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﻴﻢ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Table|Select|Table‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-4‬درج ﺳﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮن ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ای از ﯾﮏ ﺟﺪول‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Table‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Insert‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬

‫‪41‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-5‬ﺣﺬف ﺳﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮن ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ای از ﯾﮏ ﺟﺪول ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ Table|Delete‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Table‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Columns‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Rows‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Cells‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-6‬ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﯾﮏ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Split Cells‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Table‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Split Cells‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬ ‫‪ Table‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ‪ Split Cells‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻫﺮ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪Number of columns‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ‪ ٢ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻫﺮ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Number of rows‬ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻻﺍﻗﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Merage cells befor split‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ (5-1-7‬ادﻏﺎم ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ در ﯾﮏ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ اﺻﻠﯽ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Merge Cells‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Merge Cells‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Table‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (5-1-8‬ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﯾﮏ ﺟﺪول ﺑﻪ دو ﺟﺪول ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Split Table‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺳﻄﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Split Table‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Table‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )‪ .(Ctrl+Shift+Enter‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (5-1-9‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ در ﺟﺪول ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬

‫‪Format|Text‬‬

‫‪ Direction‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-10‬اﺻﻮل ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﻮع ﺟﺪول‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪42‬‬

‫‪١‬ـ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Table AutoFormat‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Table‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ Table Style‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-11‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﻮع ﺧﻄﻮط و ﭘﺲ زﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪول‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Border and Shading‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪Format‬‬

‫ﻼ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Table and Border‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬

‫‪ (5-1-12‬ﻣﺘﻤﺎﯾﺰ ﮐﺮدن ﺳﻄﺮ اول ﺟﺪول‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Heading‬‬

‫‪ Rows Repeat‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Table‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬

‫‪ (5-1-13‬ﺗﻮاﻧﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﺎر ﺑﺎ ‪ Tab‬در اﯾﺠﺎد ﺟﺪاول‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪ Tab‬ﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ Tab .‬ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Word‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺗﻨﮕﺎﺗﻨﮕﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Tab‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﺶ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Tab‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﭘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ ١/٢٧‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ )ﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ( ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪) Right Tab‬ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ L‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ( ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ‪ Tab‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣ ﹰﺎ ‪ Tab‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ Tab‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭ ‪ Word‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Decimal ،Center ،Right ،Left‬ﻭ ‪ Bar‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Format|Tab‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ‪ Tab‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ‪Tab‬‬ ‫‪Right Tab‬‬ ‫‪Decimal Tab‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ Tab‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ Tab‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﻤﺘﺮﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭﻱ )ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭﻱ( ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ‬

‫‪Bar Tab‬‬

‫ﺧﻂ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Tab‬ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Left Tab‬‬ ‫‪Center Tab‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ Tab‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭼﭗ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﮊﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ Tab‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺳﻂ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ Tab‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Tab‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪43‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ‪ Tab‬ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ‪ Tab‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﮒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ Tab‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Tab‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Tabs‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Tabs‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.(.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺟﻬﺶ ‪ Tab‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Default tab stops‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ Tab‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Tab Stop Position‬ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Tab‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫‪ ،Alignment‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Set‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Leader‬ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ ،Tab‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ Tab‬ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Clear‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ‪ Tab‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬

‫‪ Tab‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬

‫ﻧﻮﻉ ‪Tab‬‬

‫ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ Tab‬ﻫﺎﻱ‬

‫ﺛﺒﺖ ‪ Tab‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ Tab‬ﺟﺎﺭﻱ‬

‫‪ (5-2‬ﺗﻮاﻧﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ‪ ،‬اﺷﮑﺎل اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد و ﻧﻤﻮدارﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ (5-2-1‬اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮدن ﯾﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﯾﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﮔﺮاﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ É‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ‪ Inser|Picture|From File‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Insert‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ É‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺷﻜﻞ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪44‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Copy‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Past‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-2-2‬درج ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ‪ ClipArt‬در ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫‪ ،ClipArt‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﺰﻱ ﻭ ﻫﻨﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪ ،ClipArt .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ É‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪ ،ClipArt‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬

‫‪١‬ـ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻠﻜﺴﻴﻮﻥ‬

‫‪ ClipArt‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ ،Insert‬ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪،Picture‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Clip Art‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ‪ ClipArt‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪،‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Insert‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ É‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Picture‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Picture‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ‪View|Toolbar|Picture‬‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ‪ /‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬

‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻥ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ )ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ( ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ‪ /‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﻀﺎﺩ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ‬

‫‪45‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ (5-2-3‬اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮدن ﺷﮑﻠﻬﺎی اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ É‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ view‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Toolbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Drawing‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Word‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻀﻲ )‪(Oval‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻥ )‪(Arrow‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻫﻨﺮﻱ )‪(WordArt‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ‬

‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ )ﻣﺮﺑﻊ(‬

‫)‪(Text Box‬‬

‫)‪(Rectangle‬‬

‫)‪(Line‬‬

‫‪ É‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ +‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Autoshapes‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Word‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ )‪(Canvas‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Drawing‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ AutoShapes‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﺶ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﺷﻴﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭﮒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ É‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Ctrl ،Shift‬ﻭ ‪ Alt‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ :Shift‬ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺍﮒ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ )ﻣﺎﻳﻞ( ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪46‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ :Ctrl‬ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺍﮒ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺩﺭﺍﮒ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺣﻜﻢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺣﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ :Alt‬ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺍﮒ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻼ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﻭ ﭘﺮﺷﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺎﻣ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﭘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-2-4‬اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮدن ﻧﻤﻮدار ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺟﺬﺍﺑﻴﺖ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻧﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪ ،Word‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Insert|Picture|Chart‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻳﺘﻢﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﻫﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺘﻢﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ‪ West ،East‬ﻭ ‪ North‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻳﺘﻢﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺘﻢﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ‪ 1st Qtr‬ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ(‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Close‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺯﮔﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦‬ـ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﺓ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ Chart Type‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ‪ Chart Options‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Legand‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Titles‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪47‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ‪ 3D View‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ É‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Object‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Insert‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Object‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Create New‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Object Type‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Microsot Graph 2000 Chart‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-2-5‬اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮدن ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮده ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Excel‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪ Word‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫)‪ (Insert Microsoft Excel Worksheet‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻭ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻬﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ Excel‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ‪ Word‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ‪ Word‬ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-2-6‬اﻋﻤﺎل وﯾﮋه ﺑﺮ روی ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ‪ ،‬اﺷﮑﺎل اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد و ﻧﻤﻮدارﻫﺎ در ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺎری و ﺑﯿﻦ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎی ﺑﺎز ﻓﻌﺎل‬ ‫‪ (5-2-6-1‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Select Object‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭﮒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Shift‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (5-2-6-2‬ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ رﻧﮓ ﺧﻄﻮط و ﭘﺲ زﻣﯿﻨﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Line Color‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬

‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Fill Color‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﻼ ﺧﻂ( ﻣﺼﺪﺍﻕ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯ )ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ (5-2-6-3‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ اﻧﺪازه ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﮒ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪48‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ (5-2-6-4‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ‬ ‫( ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬

‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻥ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺳﺮ )‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺩﺭﮒ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (5-2-6-5‬ﺣﺬف ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Del‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Clear‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬ ‫‪ Edit‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (5-2-6-6‬ﺗﺮاز ﮐﺮدن ﻣﺘﻦ و ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺣﺎﻃﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻲ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﻴﭽﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Format Picture‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Layout‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Picture‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Text Wrapping‬‬

‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻱ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬

‫ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺸﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺎﻃﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-2-6-7‬ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪن و ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﺳﺎزی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Free Rotate‬‬

‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ Draw|Rotate or Flip‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ Drawing‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (5-2-6-8‬اﻓﺰودن ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ اﺷﮑﺎل ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪Add‬‬ ‫‪ Text‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Edit Text‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪49‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪ (5-3‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﺳﺘﻮﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ‪ Word‬ﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ )‪ (Column Break‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Column‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Column‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Foramt‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪ Columns‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Right-to-‬‬ ‫‪ Left‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Line between‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Number of columns‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Width‬ﻭ ‪ Spacing‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Equal‬‬ ‫‪ Column Width‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Break‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Insert‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Column‬‬ ‫‪ Break‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )‪.(Ctrl+Shift+Enter‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Continuous‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪ Break‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-4‬آﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ اﯾﺠﺎد ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺴﺘﯽ )ادﻏﺎم ﭘﺴﺘﯽ( ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﻬﺎی داده ای ﺑﺮای اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﯾﮏ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﭘﺴﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ )ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ( ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ )ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ( ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ )ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻼ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ( ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻗﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻧﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺩﺭﺳﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺗﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ Tabric‬ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪Field name‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﮔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺟﻨﺴﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪50‬‬

‫‪ .٣‬ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ )ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ(‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اول‪ :‬اﯾﺠﺎد ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺳﻨﺪ اﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ New‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ New‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Mail Merge‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Tools‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪Mail‬‬ ‫‪ Merge Helper‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Create‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ From Letters ...‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪New Main Document‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ دوم‪ :‬اﯾﺠﺎد ﻣﻨﺒﻊ داده ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Mail Merge Helper‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Data Source‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Get Data‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Create Data Source‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Create Data Source‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Field names in header row‬ﻟﻴﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ »ﻧﺎﻡ« ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Field name‬ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Add Field Name‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Field names in‬‬ ‫‪ header‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﻣﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪Field names in header‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬

‫‪Remove Field‬‬

‫‪ Name‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪ Ok‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪Creat Data‬‬ ‫‪ ،Source‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Save as‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﻼ ‪.(Test-1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪51‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪٤‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺭﻛﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻛﻮﺭﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Edit Data Source‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Microsoft Word‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﻲ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ ‪ Data Form‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻛﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Add New‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻛﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ View Source‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﻛﻮﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻼ ‪ (Test-2‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪٥‬ـ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Save‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ )ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦‬ـ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Merge to New Document‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Mail Merge‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ‪ n‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺳﻮم‪ :‬آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزی ﺳﻨﺪ اﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Mail Merge‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﺑﺸﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Insert‬‬ ‫‪ Merge Field‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Mail Merge‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﺪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻛﺮﻛﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪52‬‬

‫‪٣‬ـ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ View Merged Data‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-5‬آﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺴﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ New‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Mail Merge‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Tools‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Mail Merge Helper‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Create‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Envelopes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Microsoft Word‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Active Windows‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Mail Merge Helper‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Get Data‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Open‬‬ ‫‪ Data Source‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Open Data Source‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫)‪ (Test-1‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Set Up Main Document‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Microsoft Word‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪Envelope‬‬ ‫‪ Options‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ ،Envelop Options‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﻛﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﭘﺎﻛﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Font‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪) Dellivery address‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ( ﻭ‬ ‫‪) Return address‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ( ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪53‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Printing Options‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺁﺩﺭﺳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻛﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٧‬ـ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪Sample‬‬ ‫‪ envelope address‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ )ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬

‫‪٧‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Mail Merge Helper‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Close‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٨‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Merge to New Document‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Mail Merge‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ Envelopes1‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪54‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ ٦‬ـ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪ (6-1‬ﭘﯿﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪File|Print Preview‬‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Print Layout View‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Print Preview‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Standard‬‬

‫)ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ‪ Ctrl+F2‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﺎﭘﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Print Preview‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺫﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Word‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )‪ (I‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Magnifer‬‬

‫ﺭﺍ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Print Preview‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎ‬

‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﭼﺎﭖ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬

‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫‪ (6-2‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی اﺻﻠﯽ ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Print‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ )ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ‪ Ctrl+P‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ( ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‬

‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ‬

‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﭼﺎﭖ‬

‫ﭼﺎﭖ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ‬

‫ﭼﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‬

‫ﭼﺎﭖ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﻩ ﭼﺎﭖ‬

‫‪55‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪ (6-3‬آﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ اﺻﻮل ﭼﺎپ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬

‫ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ All‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Page range‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Current Page‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Page range‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻭﺝ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﺩ‬

‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪ Print‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Selection‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ،Page range‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﻛﺮﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Print‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﺔ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﭼﭗ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Odd‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ‪ Even‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺯﻭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Pages‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ Page range‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ‬ ‫ﻼ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ )‪ (-‬ﻳﺎ )‪ (,‬ﭼﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ١٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ 10-20‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ١٠‬ﻭ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪10,20‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﭼﺎپ ﺑﺮ روی ﭘﺎﮐﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Envelope and Labels‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Tools‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Envelopes‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Perview‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺴﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Print‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Options‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Labels‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻲ ‪ Envelope and Labels‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬

‫‪56‬‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Address‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Full Page of the same lable‬ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺗﻜﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Single lable‬ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻣﻊ ﭘﻴﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺗﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ .Office 2000‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺍﻓﺸﻴﻦ ﻳﻮﺭﺩﺷﺎﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪١٣٧٩ .SAMS‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﮔﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺎﻡ ‪ Word‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ .٢٠٠٢‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻧﻴﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻗﻮﺱ‪١٣٨٣ .‬‬ ‫‪٣‬ـ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﮔﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺳﺎﻓﺖ ﺁﻓﻴﺲ ‪ .XP‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻫﻨﺮﻱ ﺩﻳﺒﺎﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ‪١٣٨١ .‬‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪ ICDL‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ‪ .٢‬ﺗﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺷﺠﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﭘﺎﺳﺎﺭﮔﺎﺩ‪١٣٨٢ .‬‬ ‫‪٥‬ـ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ‪ .Word XP ٢‬ﻣﻮﻟﻔﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺳﻮﻱ؛ ﻣﺠﻴﺪ ﺳﺒﺰﻱ ﻋﻠﻲ ﮔﻞ؛ ﻣﻬﺪﻱ ﻗﺮﺑﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺎﺭ‪١٣٨٣ .‬‬ ‫‪٦‬ـ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯ ‪ .Word 2002‬ﻣﻮﻟﻔﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺗﻀﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺴﻮﻥ ﺁﺫﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻫﻨﺮﻱ ﺩﻳﺒﺎﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ‪١٣٨٣ .‬‬ ‫‪7- ECDL module 3, Reference manual Word Processing (Microsoft Word 2000 or XP), Edition for‬‬ ‫‪ECDL Syllabus. http://www.cheltenhamcourseware.com‬‬